‫ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ‬

‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬

‫ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‬

‫‪١٤١٦‬ﻫـ‬
‫‪١٩٩٦‬ﻡ‬
 ‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺓ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﱯ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﻫـ‪ -‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺯ‪ -‬ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺡ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻖ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺃﳕﻮﺫﺝ )ﺃ(‪) :‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ (‬
‫)‪ (APA‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪١١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺃﳕﻮﺫﺝ )ﺏ(‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻊ ﰲ ﲝﻮﺙ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﳍﺎ‪١٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺃﳕﻮﺫﺝ )ﺝ(‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪٢٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪٢٥ . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪٢٦ . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪٢٦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪٢٧ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪٣٠ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪٣٢ . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ) ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ(‪ :‬ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‪٣٣ . . .‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ‪٣٤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪٣٤ . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪٣٥ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪٣٦ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪٣٨ . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‪٣٩ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪٤٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪٤٠ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺴﻢ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬

‫ﺍﳊﻤﺪ ﷲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻼﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﷲ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳐﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﳝﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺄﻫﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻟـﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ – ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﳛﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫– ﻳﻨﺒﺊ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﲤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﲝﺜﻪ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺘﻪ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻫﻠﻴﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﺪﻱ‬
‫ﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﳏﻜﻤﺎ ﻭﻣﺒﻨﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﻮﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﳑﺘﻌﻪ ﺭﻏﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﳌﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻋﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺟﻬﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺨـﺬ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ – ﺣﲔ ﺇﺟﺎﺯﺗﻪ – ﻋﻠـﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻳﺘﻜﺎﻓﺄ ﻣﻊ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﲑ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻥ ﻛﺜﲑﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺭﲟـﺎ ﺃﻣـﻀﻮﺍ ﰲ ﺇﻋـﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﳐﻄﻄﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﻣﺪﺩﺍ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻘﺼﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﳐﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻔﻴﺌﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺬﻝ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺴﻨﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﺼﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺼﺎﺀ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻧﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﺯﻣﲔ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟـﺪﻯ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﺮ‬
‫‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﰲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﺃﻛﺪﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎ ﰲ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳐﻄﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻄﻠﻌﺖ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴـﺔ‬
‫ﲟﻬﻨﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻴﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳐﻄﻄﺎ‪‬ﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﳐﻄﻄﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺷﺪﻭ ﻃﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺗـﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﻢ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻟﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﻼﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﳐﻄﻄﺎ‪‬ﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﻮﺣﺪ ﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﱘ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺮ ‪‬ﺎ ﻹﻗﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﻠﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳎﺎﻟﺲ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ – ﺑﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ -‬ﻳﺮﺗﻘﻰ ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﳐﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﳝﺘـﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﳛﻔﻆ ﻛﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺫ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﳎﻠﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍ ًﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﺬﻝ ﺃﻋﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺪﻫﻢ ﰲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺗﺬﺓ ﻣﻦ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺳﻨﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠـﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ ﺇﱃ ﳉﻨﺘﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺘﲔ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ -‬ﺣﺮﺻﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻤﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﻞ ﳉﻨﺔ ﲟﻬﻤﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺴﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺄﻝ ﺍﷲ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺰﻝ ﺍﳌﺜﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﳍﻢ ﻣﻨﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﲦﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻮﺟﺰﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪-:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺪﺭﺟـﺔ‬
‫ﲢﺖ ﲣﺼﺼﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻـﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ( ‪ Basic Research‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻳﺴﲑﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳋﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻻﻳﻐﲏ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﲎ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪ -‬ﻧﺄﻣﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﰲ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴـﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﻮﻗﺘﻪ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﳉﻬﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﺮ ﷲ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‬

‫‪٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‬

‫ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‬

‫‪ -‬ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺑﺒﻨﻂ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺁ ﰊ ﺇﻡ ﺃﺳـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﺘﻔـﻰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺴﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻃﻮﻳ ﹰ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﲞﻂ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻢ __________ ﰲ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ _________ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﱄ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳـﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪﻣﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ) ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ) ﺍﻟـﱵ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ( ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﲡﻠﺪ ﲡﻠﻴﺪﹰﺍ ﻓﺎﺧﺮﹰﺍ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺃﺧﻀﺮﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﱯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﰲ ﻛﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺸﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺟﺎﺯ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺗﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﲔ ﻭﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻗـﺸﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ(‬

‫‪٦‬‬
 ‫ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﳌﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺎﻣﻲ ‪١٤١٣-١٤٠٨‬ﻫـ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﲜﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﱘ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺃﲪﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲤﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

‫‪١٤١٦‬ﻫـ ‪١٩٩٦ -‬ﻡ‬

‫‪٧‬‬
 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺯﺓ‬

‫‪٨‬‬
 ‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ A-4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﱳ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ )ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻂ( ‪ ١٨‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﰲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻱ ﰊ ﺃﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﰲ ﺃﺟﻬـﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻬﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ ﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺎﻗﻮﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳌـﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TRADITIONAL ARABIC‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻱ ﰊ ﺃﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪.single‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺒﻨﻂ ﺃﺳـﻮﺩ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺃﻱ ﰊ ﺃﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳـﻮﺩ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺒﻨﻂ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ١٨‬ﺃﻱ ﰊ ﺃﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ١٦‬ﻣﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ ) ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺷﻲ (‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ‪ ١٢‬ﺃﻱ ﰊ ﺃﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺎﻛﻴﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﱯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺟﺎﻧﱯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ ‪ ٣,٥‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳝﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﺍ ‪ ٢,٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ‪ -‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻳـﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻣﱳ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﳍﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﰒ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﰲ ﻭﺳﻄﻬﺎ ) ﺑﺴﻢ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ (‬

‫‪٩‬‬
 ‫‪ -‬ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻫﺪﺍﺀ – ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﻓﺎﻥ – ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ) ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ (‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ (‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﳏﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺑﻮﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻓﺼﻮﳍﺎ ﻭﺧﺎﲤﺘﻬﺎ (‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻜـﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﳉﺎﻧـﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻮﻗﻪ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯ‪ -‬ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﲞﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ) ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ .. ،٣ - ١ ،٢ - ١ ،١ - ١ :‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪- ٢ ،١ - ٢ :‬‬
‫‪ .. ،٣ - ٢ ،٢‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ (‪.‬‬
‫ﺡ – ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﳛﺘﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﱳ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﲰﺎﺀ ﳏﻜﻤﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﳓﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺪﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﰲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ‪‬ـﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻄﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﳝﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﶈﺴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ‬

‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ ﻫﺎﺩﻓﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﳌﻌﲏ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺒـﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﲨ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻔﺎﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﲎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﲡﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﻤﲑ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻠﻢ ﳓﻮ‬
‫" ﺃﺭﻯ ‪ ..‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﺖ ‪...‬ﺍﱁ " ﻭﺑﺪ ﹰﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ " ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪ ..‬ﻳـﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪..‬ﻭﳓﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ "‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻭﻣﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻨـﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺒـﺴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﻨﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻫﺎ ﻭﻋﻴﻮ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﺮﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﲑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻻ ﳛﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﲝﺜﻪ ﺣﱴ ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺃﻭﺻﺖ ﳉﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺬ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫‪(APA‬‬ ‫ﺃﳕﻮﺫﺝ )ﺃ(‪ :‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﲨﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ )‬
‫) ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒـﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ (‪:‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺳﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻳﻜﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﺬﻛﺮ ﻟﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ٢‬ﻭﻳﻀﻊ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻬﺪﹰﺍ ﺑﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻬﺪﹰﺍ ﺑﻨﺺ ﻓﻴﺬﻛﺮ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ )ﺹ( ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﱵ ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺺ "‪."..‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻓﻴﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﺴﺒﻮﻗﺎ ً ﲝﺮﻑ "ﺝ"‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻮﻗﺔ ﲝﺮﻑ "ﺹ" ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺙ ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻓﺎﺗـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻮﻗﺎ ً ﲝﺮﻑ "ﺕ"‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺒﻮﻗﹰﺎ ﲝﺮﻑ "ﻁ"‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺄﻥ ﰲ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ‪ APA‬ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺿﻴﻒ ﳍﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻣﺜﻠـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻴﺴﲑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻟﻜﺜﲑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷ ﲰﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺍﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺴﻌﺪ ﺟﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻓﺒﺪ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﻭﺫﻛﺮ ﺟﻼﻝ)‪١٩٩٠‬ﻡ( ﻳﺴﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻝ ﻭﺫﻛﺮ ﺳﻌﺪ ﺟﻼﻝ )‪١٩٩٠‬ﻡ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﺃﻟﻔﺒﺎﺗﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﱃ ﻛﺘﺐ ﻭﺩﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ‪....‬ﺇﱁ )ﻳﺴﺘﺜﲎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﺘﻔـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪-:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﳋﺺ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﺮﻱ )‪١٤١٥‬ﻫـ( ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻋﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻖ ‪...‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺸﻬﺎﺩ ﺑﻌﺎﱂ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺙ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﺑـﻦ ﺗﻴﻤﻴـﻪ ) ﺕ ‪٧٢٨‬ﻫــ‪ ،‬ﻁ‬
‫‪١٣٨٥‬ﻫـ( ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻄﺮﺓ ﻫﻮ‪...‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺸﻬﺎﺩ ﺑﻨﺺ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺗﻴﻤﻴﻪ ) ﺕ ‪٧٢٨‬ﻫـ‪ ،‬ﻁ ‪١٣٨٥‬ﻫـ ( ﺍﻟﻔﻄﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫" ﻓﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻓﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻄـﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻓﻄﺮﻫـﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻗـﺎﻝ‪ " :‬ﺃﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺑﻜـﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﻮﺍ ﺑﻠﻰ"‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻃﻠﺔ ﻭﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ " )ﺝ‪ ،٤‬ﺹ‪.(٢٤٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻛﺄﻥ ﻳﺄﰐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻘﺒﻪ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟـﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻄﺮﺓ " ﻫﻲ ﻓﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻡ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻓﻄﺮﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻗـﺎﻝ‪ " :‬ﺃﻟـﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺑﻜﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﻮﺍ ﺑﻠﻰ "‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻃﻞ ﻭﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ " ) ﺍﺑﻦ ﺗﻴﻤﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺕ ‪٧٢٨‬ﻫـ‪ ،‬ﻁ ‪١٣٨٥‬ﻫـ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ ،٤‬ﺹ ‪.( ٢٤٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﲔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﰲ ﺳﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﲝﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳍﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺮ ) ﺃ ‪١٤١٦‬ﻫـ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺮ ) ﺏ ‪١٤١٦‬ﻫـ (‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺍﲰﻪ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﰒ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻛﺮ ﺳﻜﻴﻨﺮ )‪(Skinner, 1972‬‬
‫ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻔﲔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻓﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺫﻛﺮ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ ﻓﻘﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻔﲔ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ " ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ " ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﻯ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺑﻦ ﳏﻤﺪ ﻭﻣـﺼﻄﻔﻲ ﻋﺒـﺪ ﺍﻟﺒـﺎﻗﻲ ﻭﺳـﻌﻴﺪ ﻫﺎﺷـﻢ‬
‫)‪١٤١٥‬ﻫـ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﲑ ) ‪(et al.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﹰﺎ ﺃﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﺎ ً ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﰲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﰒ ﺍﲰﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﰒ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﲔ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰒ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﰒ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﰒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺮ ﰒ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻟﻘﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺘﺎﺫ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ )‪ .(١٤١٥‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺫﻛﺮ ﲨﻴﻌﻬﻢ ﻭﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘـﺐ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻭﺑﻌـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﰒ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﻢ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃﺑﻮ ﺣﻄﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺆﺍﺩ ﻭﺻﺎﺩﻕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣﺎﻝ )‪ .(١٩٩٥‬ﳕﻮ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﳉﻨﲔ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﻨﲔ‪ .‬ﻁ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﳒﻠﻮ ﺍﳌﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻄﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻴـﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ )ﻁ( ﻣﺘﻠﻮﹰﺍ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻛﻤـﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻌـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﰒ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﹰ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﰒ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﹰﺍ ﰒ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﰒ ﺃﺭﻗـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﰒ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻛﻞ ﳎﻠﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﰲ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺣﱴ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﳍﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻔﻰ ﺑﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻻ ﻳـﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻮ ﺑﻜﺮ ﺃﲪﺪ ) ‪ .(١٤٠١‬ﺃﺳﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.٢٦-١٣ ،١ ،‬‬

‫ﺣﱯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺳﻒ ) ‪ .(١٤٠٤‬ﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﳊﺸﺎﺋﺶ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‪،‬‬

‫‪.٥٤٦ - ٥٢١ ،٢٨‬‬

‫ﻼ ﻻ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻟﻪ ﲟـﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻪ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﹰ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﻪ ﻭﻻ ﲟﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟـﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻨﺎﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﳏﺮﻭﺱ )‪ .(١٤٠٧‬ﺃﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪‬ﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﻼﻕ ﻋﻨـﺪ ﺍﻟﻐـﺰﺍﱄ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘـﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺄﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻛﻲ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ‪ .‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪.١٥٢-١٣٣ ،(٢٢) ٧ ،‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﻠﺼﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻀﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﻠﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟـﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻗﻮﺍﻋـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻴﺴﺮ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﰱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺷـﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺒﻘﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰱ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﲤﺎﻣﹰﺎ ﰒ ﻳﻀﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳـﲔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﹰﺍ ﰒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﺨﺺ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪Misumi, J., & Fujita, M. (1982). Effects of PM organizational‬‬

‫‪development in supermarket organization. Japanese Journal‬‬
‫‪of Experimental Social Psychology, 21, 39-111. (From‬‬
‫)‪Psychological Abstracts 1982. 68, Abstract No. 11474‬‬

‫‪١٤‬‬
 ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﲰﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺻﺪﺭ‪‬ﺎ ﰒ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﳍﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳉﻬـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺭﻑ )‪ .(١٤١٠‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﺴﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﶈﺮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺘﺒﻪ ﰒ ﻳﻌﺰﻯ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺘـﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﺼ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ )ﺫﻛﺮ ﰲ(‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻟﻘﺐ ﳏﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﲰﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﻳﻮﺿـﻊ ﺑـﲔ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ )ﳏﺮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﰒ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﰒ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻮ ﺣﻄﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺆﺍﺩ )‪ .(١٩٧٨‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ ﻟﻠﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻘﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﰲ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﲰﺎﻋﻴﻞ )ﳏﺮﺭ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ‪ .‬ﺝ‪) ،٥‬ﺹ‬
‫ﺹ ‪ .(٢١-٦‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﻓﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﰐ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﲰﺎﻋﻴﻞ )ﳏﺮﺭ( )‪ :(١٩٧٨‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﺝ‪ .٥‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ )‪ .(١٤١٥‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﺠﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬
‫ﲡﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻼﺏ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨـﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻌﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻼﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﰒ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺻﺪﺭ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﻴﺒﺎﱐ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ) ‪ ١٤٠٧‬ﺭﺟﺐ ‪ (٧‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺊ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺰﻳﺮﺓ ﺹ‪ ،١٥‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥‬‬
 ‫ﺛﺎﻣﻨﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻮﻃﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﲰﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﻓﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻪ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺳﻌﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺩ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟـﻊ ﺳـﻮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﹰﺎ ﺃﻡ ﺃﺟﻨﺒﻴﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ " ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ " ﲢـﺖ ﺍﳉـﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﳒﺰﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﹰﺎ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴـﺔ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﳕﻮﺫﺝ )ﺏ(‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻊ ﰲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﲝﻮﺙ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻸﰐ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ) ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ /‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭﻳﻘﻀﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﱳ‬
‫ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﲔ‬
‫ﳐﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﰒ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻊ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﲝـﺮﻑ ﰒ ﺭﻗـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﻴﻢ‪) ،‬ﺃ‪١٩٨١‬ﻡ(‪....‬‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﻴﻢ‪) ،‬ﺏ‪١٩٨١‬ﻡ( ‪....‬‬
‫ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻔﲔ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺃﲰﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣـﺎ ﺇﻥ‬
‫ﺯﺍﺩﻭﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻴﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ ( ﺃﻭ )‪ (et al.‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﺿﻴﻒ ﳍﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻴﺴﲑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻳﺮﻯ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ )‪١٤١٠‬ﻫـ ( ‪....‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﻯ ﻭﻳﺘﲏ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﻭﻥ )‪.... (Whitney, et al., 1983, p.12‬‬
‫ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﰊ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟـﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺭﻗـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻬﺎﺩ ﺑﻨﺺ ﻓﻴﺬﻛﺮ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ )ﺹ( ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﱵ ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺺ "‪ "...‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﻌﻲ )‪١٤١٥‬ﻫـ( ﺃﻥ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﲔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺮﻋﻮﺍ ﰲ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﳊﺘﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫" ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﻋﺘﻨﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺻﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠـﺔ‬
‫ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻘﻼﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﻓﻔﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ ﺭﺍﻓﺪﹰﺍ ﻣﻬﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺘﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﳍﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ "‪،‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٥٣٠‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻛﺄﻥ ﻳﺄﰐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻘﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫" ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﻋﺘﻨﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ......‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﱂ " )ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،١٤١٥ ،‬ﺹ‪.(٥٣٠‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻴﺴﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻫﺠﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ ) ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﻛﺮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﲰﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ( ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﲰﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨـﺸﺮ ﺑـﲔ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ ‪ ،-‬ﰒ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧﲑﹰﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨـﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻘﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺘﺎﺫ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻨﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﲪﺪ ﳏﻤﻮﺩ‪١٤١٣) ،‬ﻫـ(‪ ،‬ﺟﻴﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﰊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤـﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻚ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﲜﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fisher, W.B., (1978), The Middle East, Methuen & Co. Ltd., London.‬‬

‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ؛ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺇﲰﺎﻋﻴﻞ؛ ﺍﳋﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ؛ ﺍﻟﺰﻫـﺮﺍﱐ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒـﺪ ﺍﻟـﺮﺯﺍﻕ؛‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﻌـﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ‪١٤١٣ ) ،‬ﻫـ (‪ ،‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺟﻴـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﶈﺮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﲰﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ) ﺫﻛﺮ ﰲ ‪ (in‬ﺑﺎﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﶈﺮﺭ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﲰـﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﱄ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺮﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭﻛﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ) ﳏﺮﺭ ‪ ed.‬ﺃﻭ ﳏﺮﺭﻳﻦ ‪ (eds.‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻌـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺧـﲑﹰﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﻏﻼﱐ‪ ،‬ﺣﺒﻴﺐ ﺍﷲ ﻣﻈﻔﺮ‪١٩٨٨) ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺯﻟﺰﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﰲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑـﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺢ )ﳏﺮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻟﺰﺍﻟﻴـﺔ‪٢٨-٢٧ ،‬‬
‫ﲨﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﺓ ‪١٤٠٦‬ﻫـ )‪ ١٠-٨‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪١٩٨٦‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪ ،١٠٨-٩١‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠـﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻌﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪Chapman, R.W., (1978), Geomorphology of the Eastern margin of the‬‬
‫‪Shedgum Plateau, in S. Al-Sayari and J. Zotl, (eds.) Quaternary Period‬‬
‫‪in Saudi Arabia, (Vol.1), pp. 77-84, Springer-Verlag, New York.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ " ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﲝﻮﺙ ﻧﺪﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﲤﺮ " ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ " ﳏـﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﳏﺮﺭﻳﻦ " ﻓﻴﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﶈﺮﺭ ﰲ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﻏﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﶈـﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﶈﺮﺭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﳚﺐ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺪﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﲤﺮ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻘﺎﺩ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺛﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺗﺮﺍﺛﻴﹰﺎ ﻓﻼ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﳌﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺒﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﳍﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ‪‬ﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﱳ‪:‬‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺧﻠﺪﻭﻥ ) ﺕ ‪ ٨٠٨‬ﻫـ‪ ،‬ﻁ ‪١٩٩٠‬ﻡ ( ‪...‬‬

‫‪١٨‬‬
 ‫ﻭﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻛﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻦ ﺧﻠﺪﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺑﻦ ﳏﻤﺪ‪ ) ،‬ﺕ ‪ ٨٠٨‬ﻫـ ‪ -‬ﻁ ‪١٩٩٠‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣـﺔ ﺍﺑـﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻠﺪﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳉﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﲑﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﲰﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‪١٤١٥) ،‬ﻫـ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺟﻴﻮﻣﻮﺭﻓﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤـﺪ ﺑـﻦ ﺳـﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ،١١‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪ ،٣٣٢-٢٦٦‬ﳏﺮﻡ ‪١٤١٥‬ﻫـ )ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ ‪١٩٩٤‬ﻡ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﳋﲑ‪ ،‬ﳛﻲ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺷﻴﺦ‪١٩٩٣) ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺟﻴﻮﻣﻮﺭﻓﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻼﺋﻊ ﲝﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﻞ‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻚ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ ،٥‬ﺍﻵﺩﺍﺏ )‪ ،(٢‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪.٦٢٩– ٦٠٣‬‬

‫‪Alwelaie, Abdullah N., (1994). Protected areas in Saudi Arabia :‬‬

‫‪Sustainable use of natural resources. GeoJournal, 34 (4),‬‬
‫‪pp. 383-392.‬‬

‫ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‪١٤١٣ ) ،‬ﻫــ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻌـﺮﺝ ﺍﻷ‪‬ـﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺩﻳـﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳـﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻴﻮﻣﻮﺭﻓﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳉﺎﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﲝـﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ ،(١٢‬ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻮ ﺍﳋﲑ‪ ،‬ﳛﲕ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺷﻴﺦ‪١٩٨٤ ) ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺯﺣﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﲟﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺴﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪ ،(٦٤‬ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﲰﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟـﺔ ﺑـﲏ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﳛﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ) ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ‪ /‬ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ( ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﻤﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ‪١٤٠٦) ،‬ﻫـ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳـﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ ﳏﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻠﻰ‪١٩٨٦ ) ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜـﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻠـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪Al-Khalaf, Abdullah H., (1986), Specification and Calibration of‬‬
‫‪Bagnold`s Model for Sand Transport, Urayq Al-Buldan Dune Field,‬‬
‫‪Central Saudi Arabia, Unpublished Ph.D. Dissertation, Bloomington,‬‬
‫‪Indiana University, U.S.‬‬
‫‪Al-Ribdi, Mohammed S., (1990), The Geography of Health Care in‬‬
‫‪Saudi Arabia: Provision and Use of Primary Health Facilities in Al-‬‬
‫‪Qassim Region, Unpublished Ph.D. Thesis, University of Southampton,‬‬
‫‪U.K.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﲨﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻔﲔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﲢﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺟﻢ ﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺭ‪ ،.‬ﺑﺮﻧﺴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩ‪ ،.‬ﺩﻭﺭﻧﻜﺎﻣﺐ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ ،.‬ﺟـﻮﻧﺰ‪ ،‬ﺩ‪١٤١٥) .‬ﻫــ (‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺑﻌـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻴﻮﻣﻮﺭﻓﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟـﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪ ،(٢‬ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴـﺔ ﺍﻟـﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺪﺭﻭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﺴﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﻥ‪١٩٨٠ ) ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻋﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﻳﺘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﳊﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳍﺎ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳـﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﳛﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭ‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻬﺎﺭﺳﻴﺎ‪١٤٠٣) ،‬ﻫـ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻬﺎﺭﺳـﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﻤﻠﻜـﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪١٩٨٩) ،‬ﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺮﺍﺋﺪ ﻭﺍ‪‬ﻼﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺍﳉﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳉﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺑـﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﰒ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳉﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻟﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺪ ﺍﷲ ﺑﻦ ﻧﺎﺻﺮ‪١٤١٥) ،‬ﻫـ(‪ ،‬ﻧﻔﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻧﻔـﻮﺫ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ )ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ ،٣١‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ٩٧٧١‬ﺍﻷﺣﺪ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺷﻮﺍﻝ ‪١٤١٥‬ﻫـ (‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻴﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﳏﻤﺪ ﲪﺪ‪١٤١٥) ،‬ﻫـ(‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﺪﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪ ،‬ﳎﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﺎﻣﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ ٩ ،١٣٤٣‬ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ‪١٤١٥‬ﻫـ‪ ،‬ﺹ ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٣-٢٢‬ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ) ﺍﳋﺮﺍﺋﻂ(‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺩ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟـﻊ ﺳـﻮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﺮﺑﻴﹰﺎ ﺃﻡ ﺃﺟﻨﺒﻴﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ " ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ " ﲢـﺖ ﺍﳉـﺪﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﳒﺰﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﻣـﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢١‬‬
 ‫ﺃﳕﻮﺫﺝ ) ﺝ(‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻶﰐ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻮﻃﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴـﺔ‪ .‬ﻫــ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ‪-‬ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺯ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺡ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﹰﺎ ﻫﺠﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﲝﺴﺐ ﺃﲰﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ( ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ " ﺍﻷﺭﺷﻴﻒ "‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻮﻃﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﲰﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﻓﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻪ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ( ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﲰﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﻓﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﶈﻘﻖ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷـﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ( ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﲰﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺮﺟﻢ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌـﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ( ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﲰﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ( ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﲰﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﳜﻬـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻵﰐ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﹰﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﲰﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ‪.‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﻨﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﲰﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺻﻐﲑﻳﻦ ﻫﻜﺬﺍ؛ " " ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﲞﻂ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﰒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ) ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ (‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﲰﲔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﺮﻭﻋﻪ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺻﻐﲑﻳﻦ؛ " " )ﻣﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴـﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﳉﺎﻣﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ (‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺭﺷﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺷﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪...‬ﺍﱃ ‪ ،...‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺧﺪﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﳎﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑﳘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﻘﺐ ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻓﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﰒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻤﻜﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟـﻊ ﺣـﱴ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﻓﺘﻜﻤﻦ ﰲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻼﻡ ﻏـﲑ ﺍﳌـﺸﻬﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳌﱳ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻵﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﳛﺘﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﱳ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺮﻋﻰ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ ﰲ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪Ibid‬‬ ‫‪" Op.‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ" ‪ ،‬ﰒ‬ ‫‪Cit.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻨﻀﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﲏ "ﻧﻔﺴﻪ" ﻛﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩ‪.‬ﻡ( ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩ‪.‬ﺕ( ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﻜﺘﺐ ‪ n.p.‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒـﻊ ﻭ ‪ n.d.‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ " ":‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﺺ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻌﻘﻮﻓﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﶈﻘﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﰲ ﺍﳌﱳ‪.‬‬
‫) ( ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳍﻼﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﳍﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﻣﺆﻟـﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﳓﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫﴿ ﴾ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻮﺭﺩﺓ ﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻵﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - -‬ﺷﺮﻃﺘﺎﻥ ﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﳉﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫؛ ﺗﺄﰐ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳉﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺍﳍـﺎﻣﺶ ﻋـﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ ........) .‬؛ ‪.(........‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﰲ ﺛﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﰲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫= ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﰲ ‪‬ﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ ﻟﻠﺪﻻﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ p.‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ pp.‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﺬﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٤‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٥‬‬
 ‫ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻭﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﰐ‪:‬‬

‫‪ (١‬ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻭﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﺘﻬﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺠﻤﻟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟـﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻊ ﰲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺒﺤﺜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﻟﺪﺕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﲟﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﻏﲑ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﺭﺍﻛﺎﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ .‬ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺎﺟـﺔ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ( ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﳛﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (٢‬ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺺ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺁﻥ ﳚﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄـﺔ‬
‫ﲟﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (٣‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ :‬ﱂ ﳜﺼﺺ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻣـﻦ ﺧـﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺼﺎﻏﺔ ﺑﻮﺿـﻮﺡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﳏﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (٤‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﲝﺚ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻤﲔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ (‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (٥‬ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳـﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﲞﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻬـﺘﻢ ﺑـﺈﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳـﺔ‬
‫‪ conceptual‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ‪.operational‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬

‫ﻭﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﰐ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﲤﻬﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﲟﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ) ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﻣﱪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﲤﻬﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﲢﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻌـﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﲟﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﳏﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﻋﻮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﱂ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺫﻛـﺮﻩ‬
‫ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﻛﻤﻌﺎﺟﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ) ﳑﺎ ﱂ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻛﻤـﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑـﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺨﺼـﺼﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﺼﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﻼﻗﻰ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﺼﺪ ﻋﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻮﺍﻫﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﹰﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺻﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ )ﻭﻫﻨﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻟﺘﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﻠـﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﳚﺐ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺣﺪﺩ‪‬ﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟـﱵ ﻻ‪‬ـﻢ ﰲ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﹰﺎ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﹰﺎ ﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻴﻪ ﺫﻟـﻚ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٨‬‬
 ‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟـﱵ ﺗﻔﻴـﺪ ﰲ ﻓﻬـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺟـﻮﻉ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﹰﺎ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﳜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺩ ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺗﺒﻄـﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻈـﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻗﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ )ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠـﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﳌﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜـﺮﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻩ ﰲ ﻣﻌﻈـﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻪ ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﳑﻜﻨﹰﺎ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺠﻴـﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﹰﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﹰﺎ‪) :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ( ﻳﻌـﺮﺽ‬
‫ﲢﺘﻪ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﺘﺒﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤـﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻬﺪ ﻻﺷﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﻀﻴﻔﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﰲ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫـ‪ -‬ﻓﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷ ﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ ﰲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻢ ﳍﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﹰﺎ ﺑﺒﻠﻴﻮ ﻏﺮﻓﻴﹰﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻔﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﻢ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ ﺑﺎﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﳌـﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻻ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺇﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳏﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﲢﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺑﻘﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺷﺘﻘﺖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺷﺘﻘﺖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﳝﻜـﻦ ﻷﺳـﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍ‪‬ﺎ‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﲤﻬﻴﺪ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﺜـﻞ ﺍﳌﻨـﻬﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﱯ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﱯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻔﻲ )ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﱯ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﻭﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺳﻴﻮﻇﻔﻪ ﰲ ﲝﺜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻋﻴﻨﺘﻪ )ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳـﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻴﻨـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﻪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ )ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ( ﺍﻟﱵ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﻓﺮﺻﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﰲ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ‬
‫ﲤﺜﻞ ﺍﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳜﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻳﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺑﲏ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﲢﻘﻴﻖ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ( ﲟﻌﲏ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟـﻚ ﻭﺣـﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﻓﺮﺩ( ﰲ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺻﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋـﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌـﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﻮ‪‬ﺎ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻘﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ‪...‬ﺍﱁ‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺔ ﻭﻛـﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺑﻄﺔ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ‪ ،-‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﲑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﹰﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﻴﹰﺎ )ﻧﻈﺮﻳـﹰﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻠﺤﻘـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻲ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻴﺴﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٥‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻗﻴـﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳑﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻪ – ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﲎ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ – ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﰐ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ( ﻣﺘﺴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﳚـﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﺠﻤﻟﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳉﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺒـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺪﺍﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪-‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻳﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻌ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﳍﺎ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ‪‬ﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻖ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٦‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪:‬‬

‫‪٣١‬‬
 ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻭﺻﻔﹰﺎ ﻟﻺﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﻫﻞ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻡ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻌﲔ ﺑﺄﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻫﻠﲔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤـﻞ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﹰﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻕ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ – ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺂﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺈﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻫﺆﻻﺀ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﲢﻴﺰﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣـﺚ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌـﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴـﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ‪‬ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺘﻔﻰ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﲟﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻭﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﺣﻖ ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﰲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻴﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺘﻪ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺟﺪﻭ ﹰﻻ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﹰﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ )ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻴﻪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ(‬

‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﲟﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﲤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻪ ﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟـﻚ ﻭﺻـﻒ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰒ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﳉـﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳـﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ – ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ – ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻣـﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﲤﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﺿﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜـﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳚـﺪﻩ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﳚﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ )ﻛﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ – ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺜﺮﻭﺑﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ( ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺴﲑﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﱴ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﻘﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﻏﲑ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳚﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﻣﺲ )ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ(‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺗﻠﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﺎ ﰎ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ )ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺩﺭﺳـﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣـﺚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻧﻮﻗﺸﺖ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺋﻪ ﻭﺃﺑﺮﺯ ﻣﻼﻣﺢ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﺃﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺘﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﺿﺘﻬﺎ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳـﻮﺀ ﻛﺎﻧـﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌـﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟـﱵ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٣‬‬
 ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﲤﻬﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ‪‬ﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﺩﻋﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﱐ‪ ،‬ﻭﳜﺘﺺ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﻯ ﲤﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺎﱐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﲎ ﺑﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳـﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﳜﺘﺺ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻓـﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨـﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﰲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٢‬ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺺ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﳛﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﳚﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ‬
‫ﲟﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﺇﱃ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚـﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺎﻏﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﱪﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰲ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﲔ‪:‬‬

‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ( ﻭﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻴﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﺮﰲ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ( ﻭﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴـﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻔﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺍﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﳌﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺓ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣـﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻨـﻬﺎ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬

‫ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﲢﻮﻱ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﳛﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭﻫـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣـﺴﺐ ﺻـﻠﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳـﺎﺕ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳـﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟـﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧـﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﳌﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟـﻚ‬
‫ﳑﻜﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺣﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺒﺤﺜﻪ ﻣﻮﺿـﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻡ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﳜﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲣﺼﺼﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻔـﻀﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳـﺄﰐ‬

‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﳘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﳍﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌـﺪﺩﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻌﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﲨﻴﻌﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮﻫﺎ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٤‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﻣﱪﺭﺍ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻻ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌـﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﲢﺘـﻬﺎ ﻓـﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺄﺧﻮﺫﺓ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻱ ﺑﻘﺼﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺍﺷﺘﻘﺖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﳎﺎﱄ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻼ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -١‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﰲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻛﺎﺋﺰ ﻣﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﳍﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻃﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﺎﻧﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﺴﺒﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﺎﻟﺜﻬﺎ ﻫـﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴـﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﲏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺍﺑﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﻋﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧـﺔ ﺑـﲔ ﺍﻟﻈـﺎﻫﺮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﻣﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﲏ ﺑﺎﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﺎﺋﺰ ﻳﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺑـﺮﺍﺯ ﺃﺳـﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻫﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻫﺞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٦‬‬
 ‫‪ -٢‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ )ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪:‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﻭﺻﻒ ﳎﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﻘﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ – ﻃﺒﻘﻴﺔ – ﻋﻨﻘﻮﺩﻳﺔ – ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﳚﺐ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠـﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨـﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٣‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﻜﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﰲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﱐ‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﲟﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﳍﺎ‬
‫• ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻐﲑﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺎﻫﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫• ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳉﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺎﻫﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﳚﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﳌﻮﺿـﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٤‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻊ ﰲ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺒﻮﺑﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻗﺎﻡ ‪‬ـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺪﺭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻗﺘﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﱪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٧‬‬
 ‫‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﲢﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﺷـﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴـﺔ ﻭﺍﳋـﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳋﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻭﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﰲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺜﲑﹰﺍ ﻣـﺎ ﺗﺘﺨـﺬ ﻣـﺼﺪﺭﹰﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﲣﺘﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳋﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﰲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺘﻔﻰ ﰲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺨﻄﻂ ﲟﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻭﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺍﳌﻼﺣﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﰲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻴﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺘﻪ ﲟﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺟﺪﻭ ﹰﻻ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﹰﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﳌﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻛﻞ ﻓـﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﲟﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﲤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻪ ﶈﺘﻮﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠـﻲ ﺫﻟـﻚ ﻭﺻـﻒ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﰒ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﳉﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺘﻬﺎ )ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟـﺔ ﺍﺣﺘـﻮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﻭﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﺒﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﱵ ﲤﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺴﲑ ﻧﺘـﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺭﺿﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻔﺴﲑ ﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳚﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﳏﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻـﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣـﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿـﻮﻉ ﳏـﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿـﻮﻉ ﺍﳌـﺪﺭﻭﺱ‬
‫ﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﲟﺎ ﳛﻘﻖ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺳﻠﻔﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒ ﹰ‬

‫‪٣٨‬‬
 ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﲑ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ .١‬ﺑﻠﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿـﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺭﻭﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﻭﺿﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﳏﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﱘ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴـﺬ ﳌـﺸﻜﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿـﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺒﺤـﺚ‬
‫ﻗﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎ‪‬ﺔ ﺗﻮﻟﺪﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻐﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﱃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺣﺚ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٩‬‬
 ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳊﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﺮﺯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳـﻀﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺮﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺤﻘﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺿـﺎﻓﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﳎﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻫﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﱂ ﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﲝﺜﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻐﲏ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲝﺜﻪ ﻣـﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻡ ﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻣـﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﳌﻜـﺎﱐ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺒﺬﻝ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﻫﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﻫﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﲝﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻘﺒـﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻨﻴـﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳـﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺤﺚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﺕ ﻣـﻦ ﺣﻴـﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﳊﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﶈﺪﺛﲔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﲤﻜﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﳛﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳓﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﺑﺮﺯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﺟﺴﺘﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟـﺪﻛﺘﻮﺭﺍﻩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘـﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﺘﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻵﰐ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﱪﹰﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣـﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳـﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﻏﹰﺎ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﳛﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺎﱐ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺎﱐ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻴﲔ ﻣﺴﻮﻏﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﰒ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﺮﺿﹰﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺗﺼﻮﺭﹰﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺒﲔ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﰲ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﰲ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﲑﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٠‬‬
 ‫‪ -٢‬ﺃﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﱪﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻨﺎﻭﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺤﻘﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴـﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﰲ ﺳﺪﻩ ﰲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٣‬ﺩﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺩﻓﻌﺘﻪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿـﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟـﺬﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٤‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻳﺴﻌﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻟـﻪ ﳍـﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﹰﺎ ﻭﺛﻴﻘـﺎﹰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﱂ‪ ،‬ﳏﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٥‬ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﲢﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ " ﺍﻷﻛﺎﺩﳝﻴﺔ " ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺒﺤﺜـﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﹰﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﳜﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﻳﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ – ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ – ﻭﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫـﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﲰﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺍ ‪‬ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧـﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣـﺪﻯ ﺻـﻠﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﲝﺜﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻀﻴﻔﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٦‬ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺑﺮﺯ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﱵ ﲢﻮﻱ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴـﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴـﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﳐﻄﻮﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻫـﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳـﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﺭﺥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤١‬‬
 ‫‪ -٧‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﻀﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﲨﻊ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻈﺎ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﲨﻌﹰﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﹰﺍ ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺋﻴﹰﺎ ‪ .‬ﰒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺼﻨﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﲢﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻘﺪ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﰲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻـﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﻘـﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -٨‬ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﱐ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﳘﻴﺔ ﲟﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺄﻧﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﱵ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﱪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻲ ﻭﺍﳊـﻀﺎﺭﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﹰﻻ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ( ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﲟﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ( ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﺒﺘﻐﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ( ﺍﳌﻨﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ( ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ( ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯ( ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻮﻃﺌﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﳜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٢‬‬
 ‫ﺛﺎﻟﺜﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻋﻰ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﲏ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﳜﻴـﺔ ﻭﺍﳊـﻀﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﲝﺚ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴـﺔ‪ ،‬ﳏﻘﻘـﺔ ﺃﻫـﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﴰﻮﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳋﺎﲤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻄﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﳚﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃ‪‬ﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣـﻮﺟﺰﹰﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺼﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﱵ ﺃﺛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭﱂ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﳋﺮﻭﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﳎﺎﻝ ﲝﺜﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺜﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﺎﻣﺴﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻭﳛﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻘﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻥ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻋـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺛﻨﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﱵ ﻻ ﳛﺘﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﱳ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻘﺘﻀﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳊﻜﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﰲ ﺣﻜﻤﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎﻻ ﳛﺘﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﱳ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻟﻪ ﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺩﺳﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻌﲏ ﻛﺸﺎﰲ ﺍﻷﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﲞﺎﺻﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﶈﻘﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٣‬‬